With the introduction of the Australian Curriculum, teachers will be using the two curricula; Australian Curriculum and the NTCF to teach, assess and report. In 2012 the Learning Area Achievement Standards for the Northern Territory were developed to enable a consistent assessment and reporting methodology using the two curricula. Northern Territory Government – Dept. of Education

With this in mind, FutureSchool provides both the Australian Curriculum and the Northern Territory Curriculum Framework for your family or school. This will remain in place until the full rollout and integration has been completed.

Whatever level your family, you can rest assured that FutureSchool will complement and work hand-in-hand with their current schoolwork.

For those schools that offer the International Baccalaureate or Cambridge International Examinations curricula, these are also available within FutureSchool as part of its standard curriculum library.

To see more detail about lessons covered within our subjects, just click on your state from the list:

Mathematics

Literacy





Mathematics

NT Reception Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Reception
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Using and applying number The numbers 1 to 5
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5
3 Using and applying number The numbers 6 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match cardinal words and numbers with groups of 6-9 objects.
4 The number system Ordinal numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match ordinal words and numbers with groups of 1-9 objects.
5 Using and applying number Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero.
6 Using and applying number The number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number.
7 Using and applying number Numbers 11 to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number.
8 Time, days of week Days of the week
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary.
9 Exam Exam – Reception
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 1 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 1
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Using and applying number The numbers 1 to 5
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5
3 Using and applying number The numbers 6 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match cardinal words and numbers with groups of 6-9 objects.
4 The number system Ordinal numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match ordinal words and numbers with groups of 1-9 objects.
5 Using and applying number Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero.
6 Using and applying number The number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number.
7 Using and applying number Numbers 11 to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number.
8 Using and applying number Using place value to order numbers up to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to order numbers up to the value of 20.
9 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
10 Time, days of week Days of the week
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary.
11 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
12 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
13 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
14 Time, duration Duration
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units.
15 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
16 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
17 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
18 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
19 Calculation-multiplication The multiplication sign
Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems.
20 Calculation sharing/division Strategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
21 Calculations The numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
22 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
23 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
24 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
25 Exam Exam – Year 1
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 2 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 2
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Using and applying number Numbers 11 to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number.
3 Using and applying number Using place value to order numbers up to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to order numbers up to the value of 20.
4 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
5 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
6 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
7 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
8 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
9 Calculations The numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
10 Calculation 10-100 Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
11 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
12 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
13 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
14 Area Comparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
15 Time, duration Duration
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units.
16 Time, months Months and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
17 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
18 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
19 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
20 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
21 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
22 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
23 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
24 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
25 Calculation-multiplication The multiplication sign
Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems.
26 Calculation sharing/division Strategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
27 Calculation-multiples Multiples of 10 up to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write, rename and add multiples of ten.
28 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
29 Exam Exam – Year 2
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 3 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 3
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
3 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
4 Calculations The numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
5 Calculation 10-100 Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
6 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
7 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
8 Subtraction Subtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
9 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
10 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
11 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
12 Area Comparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
13 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
14 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
15 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
16 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
17 Time, months Months and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
18 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
19 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
20 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
21 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
22 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
23 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
24 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
25 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
26 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
27 Calculation-multiplication The multiplication sign
Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems.
28 Calculation sharing/division Strategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
29 Calculation-multiples Multiples of 10 up to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write, rename and add multiples of ten.
30 Calculation-larger numbers The numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
31 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
32 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
33 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
34 Problems Solve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
35 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
36 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
37 Exam Exam – Year 3
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 4 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 4
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
3 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
4 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
5 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
6 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
7 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
8 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
9 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
10 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
11 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
12 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
13 Calculation 10-100 Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
14 Calculation-larger numbers The numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
15 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
16 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
17 Subtraction Subtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
18 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
19 Problems Solve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
20 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
21 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
22 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
23 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
24 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
25 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
26 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
27 Decimals Introduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
28 Decimals Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
29 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
30 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
31 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
32 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
33 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
34 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
35 Area Comparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
36 Area Introduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
37 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
38 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
39 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
40 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
41 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
42 Time, months Months and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
43 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
44 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
45 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
46 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
47 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
48 Time, units Units of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
49 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
50 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
51 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
52 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
53 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
54 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
55 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
56 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
57 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
58 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
59 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
60 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
61 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
62 Exam Exam – Year 4
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 5 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 5
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Calculation-larger numbers The numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
3 Subtraction Subtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
4 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
5 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
6 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
7 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
8 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
9 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
10 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
11 Problems Solve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
12 Place value The numbers 1000 to 9999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
13 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
14 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
15 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
16 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
17 Decimals Introduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
18 Decimals Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
19 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
20 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
21 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
22 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
23 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
24 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
25 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
26 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
27 Area Comparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
28 Area Introduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
29 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
30 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
31 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
32 Multiplication Multiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
33 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
34 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
35 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
36 Counting and numeration Addition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
37 Subtraction Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
38 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
39 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
40 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
41 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
42 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
43 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
44 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication.
45 Multiplication Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication.
46 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
47 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
48 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
49 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
50 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
51 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
52 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
53 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
54 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
55 Time, units Units of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
56 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
57 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
58 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
59 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
60 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
61 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
62 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
63 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20.
64 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders.
65 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
66 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
67 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
68 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
69 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
70 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
71 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
72 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
73 Exam Exam – Year 5
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 6 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 6
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Subtraction Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
3 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
4 Multiplication Multiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
5 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
6 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
7 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
8 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
9 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
10 Multiplication Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 3-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 4 digit numbers by any 3 digit numbers using long multiplication.
11 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20.
12 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders.
13 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders.
14 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders.
15 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders.
16 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
17 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
18 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
19 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
20 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
21 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
22 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
23 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
24 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
25 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
26 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
27 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
28 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
29 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
30 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
31 Decimals Decimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
32 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
33 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
34 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
35 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
36 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
37 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
38 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
39 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
40 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
41 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
42 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
43 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
44 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
45 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
46 Volume Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
47 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
48 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
49 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
50 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
51 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
52 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
53 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
54 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
55 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
56 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
57 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
58 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
59 Weight/mass The tonne – converting units and problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another.
60 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
61 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
62 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
63 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
64 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
65 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
66 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
67 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
68 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
69 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
70 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
71 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
72 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
73 Sign word problems Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
74 Equations Problem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
75 Number problems Problems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
76 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions
77 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders.
78 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 with dividends of 3 and 4-digits with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 and where dividends are 3 and 4 digit numbers, and there are some remainders.
79 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 with dividends of thousands and some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to use Long Division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 including division of thousands, and some remainders.
80 Exam Exam – Year 6
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 7 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 7
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Subtraction Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
3 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
4 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
5 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
6 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
7 Multiplication Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 3-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 4 digit numbers by any 3 digit numbers using long multiplication.
8 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
9 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
10 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
11 Fractions Subtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
12 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator.
13 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
14 Fractions Multiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
15 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
16 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
17 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
18 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
19 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
20 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
21 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
22 Decimals Decimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
23 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
24 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
25 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
26 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
27 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
28 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
29 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
30 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
31 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
32 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
33 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
34 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
35 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
36 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
37 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
38 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
39 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
40 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
41 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
42 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
43 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
44 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
45 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
46 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
47 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
48 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
49 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
50 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
51 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
52 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
53 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
54 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
55 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
56 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
57 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
58 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
59 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
60 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
61 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
62 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
63 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
64 Sign word problems Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
65 Equations Problem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
66 Number problems Problems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
67 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
68 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
69 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
70 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
71 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
72 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
73 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
74 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
75 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
76 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
77 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
78 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
79 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
80 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
81 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
82 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
83 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
84 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
85 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
86 Exam Exam – Year 7
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 8 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 8
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
3 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
4 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
5 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
6 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
7 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
8 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
9 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
10 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
11 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
12 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
13 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
14 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
15 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
16 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
17 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
18 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
19 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
20 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
21 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
22 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
23 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
24 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
25 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
26 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
27 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
28 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
29 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
30 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
31 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
32 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
33 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
34 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
35 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
36 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
37 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
38 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
39 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
40 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
41 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
42 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
43 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
44 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
45 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
46 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
47 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
48 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
49 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
50 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
51 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
52 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
53 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
54 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
55 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
56 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
57 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
58 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
59 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
60 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
61 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
62 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
63 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
64 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
65 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
66 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
67 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
68 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
69 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
70 Exam Exam – Year 8
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 9 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 9
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
3 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
4 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
5 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
6 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
7 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
8 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
9 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
10 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
11 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
12 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
13 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
14 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
15 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
16 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
17 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
18 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
19 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
20 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
21 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
22 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
23 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
24 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
25 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
26 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
27 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
28 Surds Introducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
29 Surds Some rules for the operations with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds.
30 Surds Simplifying surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication.
31 Surds Creating entire surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write numbers as entire surds and compare numbers by writing as entire surds
32 Surds Adding and subtracting like surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract surds and simplify expressions by collecting like surds.
33 Surds Expanding surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and then simplify binomial expressions involving surds.
34 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
35 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
36 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
37 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
38 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
39 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
40 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
41 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
42 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
43 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
44 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
45 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
46 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
47 Geometry-polygons Angles of regular polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the angle sum of a polygon formula, and understand that the external angles of a polygon add up to 360 degrees.
48 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
49 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
50 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
51 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
52 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
53 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
54 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
55 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
56 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
57 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
58 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
59 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
60 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
61 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
62 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
63 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
64 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
65 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
66 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
67 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
68 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
69 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
70 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
71 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
72 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
73 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
74 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
75 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
76 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
77 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
78 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
79 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
80 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
81 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
82 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
83 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
84 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
85 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
86 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
87 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
88 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
89 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
90 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
91 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
92 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
93 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
94 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
95 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
96 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
97 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
98 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
99 Exam Exam – Year 9
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 9 Extension Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 9 Extension
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
3 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
4 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
5 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
6 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
7 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
8 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
9 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
10 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
11 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
12 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
13 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
14 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
15 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
16 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
17 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
18 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
19 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
20 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
21 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
22 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
23 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
24 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
25 Surds Introducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
26 Surds Some rules for the operations with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds.
27 Surds Simplifying surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication.
28 Surds Creating entire surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write numbers as entire surds and compare numbers by writing as entire surds
29 Surds Adding and subtracting like surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract surds and simplify expressions by collecting like surds.
30 Surds Expanding surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and then simplify binomial expressions involving surds.
31 Surds Binomial expansions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds.
32 Surds Conjugate binomials with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds.
33 Surds Rationalising the denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds.
34 Surds Rationalising binomial denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions.
35 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
36 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
37 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
38 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
39 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
40 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
41 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
42 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
43 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
44 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
45 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
46 Geometry-polygons Angles of regular polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the angle sum of a polygon formula, and understand that the external angles of a polygon add up to 360 degrees.
47 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
48 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
49 Geometry-congruence Proofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
50 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
51 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
52 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
53 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
54 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
55 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
56 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
57 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
58 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
59 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
60 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
61 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
62 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
63 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
64 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
65 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
66 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
67 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
68 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
69 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
70 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
71 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
72 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
73 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
74 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
75 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
76 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
77 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
78 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
79 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
80 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
81 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
82 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
83 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
84 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
85 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
86 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
87 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
88 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
89 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
90 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
91 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
92 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
93 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
94 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
95 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
96 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
97 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
98 Graphing binomials Binomial products.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term binomial product and be capable of expanding and simplifying an expression.
99 Graphing binomials Binomial products with negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand specific terms and be prepared to expand and simplify different monic binomial products.
100 Graphing binomials Binomial products [non-monic].
Objective: On completion of the lesson, the student will have examined more complex examples with binomial products.
101 Squaring binomial Squaring a binomial. [monic]
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should understand the simple one-step process of squaring a monic binomial.
102 Squaring binomial Squaring a binomial [non-monic].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will apply the same rule that is used with monic binomials.
103 Factorising Expansions leading to the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand expansions leading to differences of 2 squares.
104 Algebraic expressions-products Products in simplification of algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simplification of algebraic expressions in step-by-step processing.
105 Algebraic expressions-larger expansions Algebraic Expressions – Larger expansions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of expanding larger algebraic expressions.
106 Algebra-highest common factor Highest common factor.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression.
107 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
108 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
109 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
110 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
111 Exam Exam – Year 9 Extension
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 10 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 10
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
3 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
4 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
5 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
6 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
7 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
8 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
9 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
10 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
11 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
12 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
13 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
14 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
15 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
16 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
17 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
18 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
19 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
20 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
21 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
22 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
23 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
24 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
25 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
26 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
27 Surds Introducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
28 Surds Some rules for the operations with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds.
29 Surds Simplifying surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication.
30 Surds Creating entire surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write numbers as entire surds and compare numbers by writing as entire surds
31 Surds Adding and subtracting like surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract surds and simplify expressions by collecting like surds.
32 Surds Expanding surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and then simplify binomial expressions involving surds.
33 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
34 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
35 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
36 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
37 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
38 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
39 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
40 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
41 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
42 Geometry-polygons Angles of regular polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the angle sum of a polygon formula, and understand that the external angles of a polygon add up to 360 degrees.
43 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
44 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
45 Geometry-congruence Proofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
46 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
47 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
48 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
49 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
50 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
51 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
52 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
53 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
54 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
55 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
56 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
57 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
58 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
59 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
60 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
61 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
62 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
63 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
64 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
65 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
66 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
67 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
68 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
69 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
70 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
71 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
72 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
73 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
74 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
75 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
76 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
77 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
78 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
79 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
80 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
81 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
82 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
83 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
84 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
85 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
86 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
87 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
88 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
89 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
90 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
91 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
92 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
93 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
94 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
95 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
96 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
97 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
98 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
99 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
100 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
101 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
102 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
103 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
104 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
105 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
106 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
107 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
108 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
109 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
110 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
111 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
112 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
113 Exam Exam – Year 10
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 10 Extension Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 10 Extension
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
3 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
4 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
5 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
6 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
7 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
8 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
9 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
10 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
11 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
12 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
13 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
14 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
15 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
16 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
17 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
18 Surds Introducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
19 Surds Some rules for the operations with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds.
20 Surds Simplifying surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication.
21 Surds Creating entire surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write numbers as entire surds and compare numbers by writing as entire surds
22 Surds Adding and subtracting like surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract surds and simplify expressions by collecting like surds.
23 Surds Expanding surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and then simplify binomial expressions involving surds.
24 Surds Binomial expansions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds.
25 Surds Conjugate binomials with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds.
26 Surds Rationalising the denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds.
27 Surds Rationalising binomial denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions.
28 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
29 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
30 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
31 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
32 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
33 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
34 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
35 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
36 Geometry-polygons Angles of regular polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the angle sum of a polygon formula, and understand that the external angles of a polygon add up to 360 degrees.
37 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
38 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
39 Geometry-congruence Proofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
40 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
41 Geometry-quadrilaterals Proving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
42 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
43 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
44 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
45 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
46 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
47 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
48 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
49 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
50 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
51 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
52 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
53 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
54 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
55 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
56 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
57 Conic sections The parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
58 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
59 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
60 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
61 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
62 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
63 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
64 Fractional indices/exponents Fractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
65 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
66 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
67 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
68 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
69 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
70 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
71 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
72 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
73 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
74 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
75 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
76 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
77 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
78 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
79 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
80 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
81 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
82 Graphing binomials Binomial products.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term binomial product and be capable of expanding and simplifying an expression.
83 Graphing binomials Binomial products with negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand specific terms and be prepared to expand and simplify different monic binomial products.
84 Graphing binomials Binomial products [non-monic].
Objective: On completion of the lesson, the student will have examined more complex examples with binomial products.
85 Squaring binomial Squaring a binomial. [monic]
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should understand the simple one-step process of squaring a monic binomial.
86 Squaring binomial Squaring a binomial [non-monic].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will apply the same rule that is used with monic binomials.
87 Factorising Expansions leading to the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand expansions leading to differences of 2 squares.
88 Algebraic expressions-products Products in simplification of algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simplification of algebraic expressions in step-by-step processing.
89 Algebraic expressions-larger expansions Algebraic Expressions – Larger expansions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of expanding larger algebraic expressions.
90 Algebra-highest common factor Highest common factor.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression.
91 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
92 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
93 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
94 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
95 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
96 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
97 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
98 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
99 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
100 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
101 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
102 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
103 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
104 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
105 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
106 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
107 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
108 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
109 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
110 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
111 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
112 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
113 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
114 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
115 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
116 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
117 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
118 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
119 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
120 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
121 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
122 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
123 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
124 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
125 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
126 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
127 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
128 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
129 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
130 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
131 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
132 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
133 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
134 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
135 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
136 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
137 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
138 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
139 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
140 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
141 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
142 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
143 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
144 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
145 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
146 Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept form Intercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
147 Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equations Parallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
148 Co-ordinate Geometry-Perpendicular lines Perpendicular lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the equation of a line, given that it is perpendicular to another stated line.
149 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
150 Exam Exam – Year 10 Extension
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 1: Earning and Spending Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 1: Earning and Spending
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
3 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
4 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
5 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
6 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
7 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
8 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
9 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
10 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
11 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
12 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
13 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
14 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
15 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
16 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
17 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
18 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
19 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
20 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
21 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
22 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
23 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 1: Earning and Spending
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 2: Measurement Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 2: Measurement
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
3 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
4 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
5 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
6 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
7 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
8 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
9 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
10 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
11 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
12 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
13 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
14 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
15 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
16 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
17 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
18 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
19 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
20 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
21 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
22 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
23 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
24 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
25 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
26 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
27 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
28 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
29 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
30 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
31 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
32 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
33 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
34 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
35 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
36 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 2: Measurement
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 3: Data in Context Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 3: Data in Context
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
3 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
4 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
5 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
6 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
7 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
8 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
9 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
10 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
11 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
12 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
13 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
14 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
15 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
16 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
17 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
18 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
19 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
20 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
21 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
22 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
23 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
24 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
25 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
26 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
27 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 3: Data in Context
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 4: Networks and Matrices Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 4: Networks and Matrices
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Matrices Basic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
3 Matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
4 Matrices Scalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
5 Matrices Multiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
6 Matrices Translation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
7 Matrices Translation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
8 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
9 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
10 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
11 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
12 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
13 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
14 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
15 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
16 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 4: Networks and Matrices
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 5: Saving and Borrowing Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 5: Saving and Borrowing
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
3 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
4 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
5 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
6 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 5: Saving and Borrowing
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 6: Simulating Random Processes Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 6: Simulating Random Processes
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
3 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
4 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
5 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
6 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
7 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
8 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
9 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
10 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
11 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
12 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
13 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
14 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
15 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
16 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
17 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
18 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
19 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
20 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
21 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
22 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
23 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
24 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
25 Statistic-probability Binomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
26 Statistic-probability Binomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
27 Statistic-probability Counting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
28 Statistic-probability Unordered selections – combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formula, n c r both with and without a calculator and be able to use it to solve probability problems where unordered selections happen.
29 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 6: Simulating Random Processes
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 7: Statistics Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 7: Statistics
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
3 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
4 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
5 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
6 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
7 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
8 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
9 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
10 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
11 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
12 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
13 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
14 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
15 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
16 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
17 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
18 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
19 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
20 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
21 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
22 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
23 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 7: Statistics
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 8: Geometry and Mensuration Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 8: Geometry and Mensuration
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
3 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
4 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
5 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
6 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
7 Geometry-constructions Geometric constructions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses.
8 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
9 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
10 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
11 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
12 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
13 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
14 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
15 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
16 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
17 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
18 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
19 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
20 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
21 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
22 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
23 Trigonometry-exact ratios Trigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
24 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
25 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
26 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
27 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
28 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
29 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 8: Geometry and Mensuration
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 9: Models of Growth Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 9: Models of Growth
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
3 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
4 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
5 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
6 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
7 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
8 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
9 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
10 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
11 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
12 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
13 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
14 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
15 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
16 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
17 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
18 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
19 Logarithms-Logs to solve equations Using logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
20 Logarithms-Change base formula Change of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
21 Logarithms-Graph-log curve The graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
22 Logarithms-Log curves Working with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
23 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
24 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
25 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
26 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
27 Arithmetic Progression The arithmetic progression
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is an Arithmetic Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the A.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
28 Arithmetic Progression Finding the position of a term in an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve many problems involving finding terms of an Arithmetic Progression.
29 Arithmetic Progression Given two terms of A.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find any term of an Arithmetic Progression when given two terms
30 Arithmetic Progression Arithmetic means
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make an arithmetic progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of arithmetic means.
31 Arithmetic Progression The sum to n terms of an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum of an Arithmetic Progression and how to use them in solving problems.
32 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
33 Geometric Progression Finding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
34 Geometric Progression Given two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
35 Sequences and Series-Geometric means Geometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
36 Sequences and Series-Sum of gp The sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
37 Sequences and Series-Sigma notation Sigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
38 Sequences and Series-Sum-infinity Limiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
39 Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinity Recurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
40 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
41 Sequences and Series-Superannuation Superannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
42 Sequences and Series-Time payments Time payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
43 Sequences and Series Applications of arithmetic sequences
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of problems involving practical situations with arithmetic series.
44 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 9: Models of Growth
Objective: Exam
# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 10: Quadratic and other Polynomials
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
3 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
4 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
5 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
6 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
7 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
8 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
9 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
10 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
11 Surds Binomial expansions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds.
12 Surds Conjugate binomials with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds.
13 Surds Rationalising the denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds.
14 Surds Rationalising binomial denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions.
15 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
16 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
17 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
18 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
19 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
20 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
21 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
22 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
23 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
24 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
25 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
26 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
27 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
28 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
29 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
30 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
31 Logarithms-Complex numbers Imaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
32 Logarithms-Complex numbers Complex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
33 Logarithms-Complex numbers Plotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
34 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
35 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
36 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
37 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
38 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
39 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
40 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
41 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
42 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
43 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
44 Roots quad equations Sum and product of roots of quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum and product of roots of quadratic polynomials and how to use them. The student will understand how to form a quadratic equation given its roots.
45 Roots quad equations Sum and product of roots of cubic and quartic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to do problems on the sum and products of roots of cubic and quartic equations.
46 Approx roots Methods of approximating roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of finding approximate roots of polynomial equations using half the interval method. The student will be able to make a number of applications of this rule within the one question.
47 Newton’s approx Newton’s method of approximation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use Newton’s method in finding approximate roots of polynomial equations and be capable of more than one application of this method.
48 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 10: Quadratic and other Polynomials
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 10: Quadratic and other Polynomials Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 10: Quadratic and other Polynomials
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
3 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
4 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
5 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
6 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
7 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
8 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
9 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
10 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
11 Surds Binomial expansions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds.
12 Surds Conjugate binomials with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds.
13 Surds Rationalising the denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds.
14 Surds Rationalising binomial denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions.
15 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
16 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
17 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
18 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
19 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
20 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
21 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
22 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
23 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
24 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
25 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
26 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
27 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
28 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
29 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
30 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
31 Logarithms-Complex numbers Imaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
32 Logarithms-Complex numbers Complex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
33 Logarithms-Complex numbers Plotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
34 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
35 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
36 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
37 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
38 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
39 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
40 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
41 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
42 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
43 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
44 Roots quad equations Sum and product of roots of quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum and product of roots of quadratic polynomials and how to use them. The student will understand how to form a quadratic equation given its roots.
45 Roots quad equations Sum and product of roots of cubic and quartic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to do problems on the sum and products of roots of cubic and quartic equations.
46 Approx roots Methods of approximating roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of finding approximate roots of polynomial equations using half the interval method. The student will be able to make a number of applications of this rule within the one question.
47 Newton’s approx Newton’s method of approximation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use Newton’s method in finding approximate roots of polynomial equations and be capable of more than one application of this method.
48 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 10: Quadratic and other Polynomials
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 11: Coordinate Geometry Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 11: Coordinate Geometry
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
3 Coordinate Geometry-the plane Distance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
4 Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slope Mid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
5 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
6 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
7 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
8 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
9 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
10 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
11 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
12 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
13 Conic sections Circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
14 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
15 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
16 Conic sections Hyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
17 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
18 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – single condition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term locus and describe several using a single condition.
19 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – multiple conditions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will describe a locus that satisfies multiple conditions on a number plane.
20 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
21 Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept form Intercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
22 Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equations Parallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
23 Co-ordinate Geometry-Perpendicular lines Perpendicular lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the equation of a line, given that it is perpendicular to another stated line.
24 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
25 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Perpendicular distance
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the formula to calculate the distance between a given point and a given line. The student will also be able to calculate the distance between parallel lines.
26 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Line through intersection of two given lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line which goes through the intersection of two given lines and also through another named point or satisfies some other specified condition.
27 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Internal and external division of an interval
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide an interval according to a given ratio and to calculate what point divides an interval in a given ratio for both internal and external divisions.
28 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 11: Coordinate Geometry
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 12: Functions and Graphs Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 12: Functions and Graphs
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
3 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
4 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
5 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
6 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
7 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
8 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
9 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
10 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
11 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
12 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
13 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
14 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
15 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
16 Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept form Intercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
17 Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equations Parallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
18 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
19 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
20 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
21 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
22 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
23 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
24 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
25 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
26 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
27 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
28 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
29 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
30 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
31 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
32 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
33 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
34 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
35 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
36 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
37 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
38 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
39 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
40 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
41 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
42 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
43 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
44 Conic sections Introduction to conic sections and their general equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the conic section from the coefficients of the equation.
45 Conic sections The parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
46 Conic sections Circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
47 Conic sections Ellipses
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices and axes of an ellipse.
48 Conic sections Hyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
49 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
50 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
51 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
52 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
53 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
54 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
55 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
56 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
57 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
58 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
59 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
60 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
61 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
62 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
63 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
64 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
65 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
66 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
67 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
68 Polar coordinates Write and graph points in polar form with negative vectors (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using negative angles and negative vector lengths.
69 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 12: Functions and Graphs
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 13: Planar Geometry Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 13: Planar Geometry
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
3 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
4 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
5 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
6 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
7 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
8 Special triangles Special triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
9 Geometry-constructions Geometric constructions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses.
10 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
11 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
12 Geometry-congruence Proofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
13 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
14 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
15 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
16 Geometry – triangles Triangle inequality theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use the triangle inequality theorem.
17 Geometry-quadrilaterals Midsegments of Triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use coordinate geometry to apply the midsegment properties of a triangle.
18 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
19 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
20 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
21 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
22 Geometry To identify collinear points, coplanar lines and points in 2 and 3 dimensions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use correct terms to describe points, lines, intervals and rays.
23 Geometry – angles To determine angle labelling rules, naming angles according to size, angle bisector properties and related algebra
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will label angles, use a protractor and perform calculations using algebra involving angles.
24 Geometry-constructions Angle bisector construction and its properties (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to bisect an angle using a pair of compasses and a straight edge.
25 Geometry-constructions Circumcentre and incentre (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able geometrically construct the circumcentre and incentre for a triangle and to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate values.
26 Geometry-constructions Orthocentre and centroids (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able geometrically construct the orthocentre and centroid for a triangle and to use algebra to calculate values.
27 Geometry-quadrilaterals Classifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
28 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
29 Geometry-quadrilaterals Proving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
30 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
31 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
32 Geometry-quadrilaterals The quadrilateral family and coordinate methods in geometry
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will know the relationships between quadrilaterals and use coordinate methods to prove some of the properties.
33 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – single condition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term locus and describe several using a single condition.
34 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – multiple conditions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will describe a locus that satisfies multiple conditions on a number plane.
35 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
36 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
37 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
38 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
39 Polar coordinates Write and graph points in polar form with negative vectors (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using negative angles and negative vector lengths.
40 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
41 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
42 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
43 Logic Mathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
44 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
45 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal arcs on circles of equal radii subtend equal angles at the centre. Theorem – Equal angles at the centre of a circle on equal arcs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘Equal arcs on circles of equal radii, subtend equal angles at the centre’, and that ‘Equal angles at the centre of a circle stand on equal arcs.’ They should then be able to use these pro
46 Circle Geometry Theorem – The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord. Theorem – The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular to the chord.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord.’ and its converse theorem ‘The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular’
47 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centres. Theorem – Chords in a circle which are equidistant from the centre are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centre.
48 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
49 Circle Geometry Theorem – Angles in the same segment of a circle are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angles in the same segment are equal.
50 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle of a semi-circle is a right angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The angle of a semi-circle is a right-angle.’
51 Circle Geometry Theorem – The opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
52 Circle Geometry Theorem – The exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite.
53 Circle Geometry Theorem – The tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radius drawn to it at the point of contact.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the tangent and the radius of a circle are perpendicular at the point of contact.
54 Circle Geometry Theorem – Tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
55 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
56 Circle Geometry-cyclic quads Theorem – If the opposite angles in a quadrilateral are supplementary then the quadrilateral is cyclic.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that a quadrilateral is cyclic using the supplementary angles theorem.
57 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 13: Planar Geometry
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 - 14: Periodic Phenomena Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 – 14: Periodic Phenomena
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Trig complementary angles Complementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
3 Trig identities Trigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
4 Trig larger angles Angles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
5 Trig larger angles Trigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
6 Graph sine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
7 Graph cosine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
8 Graphs tan curve Graphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
9 Trig larger angles Using one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
10 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
11 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
12 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
13 Trigonometry Sin(A+B) etc sum and difference identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using the reference triangles for 30, 45 and 60 degrees with the sum and difference of angles to find additional exact values of trigonometric ratios.
14 Trigonometry Double angle formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the double angle trig identities.
15 Trigonometry Half angle identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the power reducing formulas and the half angle trig identities.
16 Trigonometry t Formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations using the t substitution.
17 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
18 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
19 Exam Exam – Year 11 – 14: Periodic Phenomena
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 Applied 1: Applied Geometry Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 Applied 1: Applied Geometry
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
3 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
4 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
5 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
6 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
7 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
8 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
9 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
10 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
11 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
12 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
13 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
14 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
15 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
16 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
17 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
18 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
19 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
20 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
21 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
22 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
23 Volume Volume of pyramids and cones.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones.
24 Volume Composite solids.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately.
25 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
26 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
27 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
28 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
29 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
30 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
31 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
32 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
33 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
34 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
35 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
36 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
37 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
38 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
39 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
40 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
41 Geometry-constructions Geometric constructions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses.
42 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
43 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
44 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
45 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
46 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
47 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
48 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
49 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
50 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
51 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
52 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
53 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
54 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
55 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
56 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
57 Trigonometry-exact ratios Trigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
58 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
59 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
60 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
61 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
62 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
63 Exam Exam – Year 11 Applied 1: Applied Geometry
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 Applied 2: Investments and Loans Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 Applied 2: Investments and Loans
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
3 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
4 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
5 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
6 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
7 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
8 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
9 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
10 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
11 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
12 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
13 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
14 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
15 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
16 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
17 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
18 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
19 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
20 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
21 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
22 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
23 Exam Exam – Year 11 Applied 2: Investments and Loans
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 Applied 3: Maths and Small Business Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 Applied 3: Maths and Small Business
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
3 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
4 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
5 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
6 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
7 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
8 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
9 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
10 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
11 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
12 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
13 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
14 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
15 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
16 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
17 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
18 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
19 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
20 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
21 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
22 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
23 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
24 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
25 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
26 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
27 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
28 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
29 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
30 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
31 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
32 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
33 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
34 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
35 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
36 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
37 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
38 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
39 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
40 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
41 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
42 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
43 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
44 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
45 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
46 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
47 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
48 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
49 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
50 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
51 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
52 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
53 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
54 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
55 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
56 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
57 Exam Exam – Year 11 Applied 3: Maths and Small Business
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 Applied 4: Matrices Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 Applied 4: Matrices
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Matrices Basic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
3 Matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
4 Matrices Scalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
5 Matrices Multiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
6 Matrices Translation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
7 Matrices Translation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
8 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
9 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
10 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
11 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
12 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
13 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
14 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
15 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
16 Exam Exam – Year 11 Applied 4: Matrices
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 Applied 5: Optimisation Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 Applied 5: Optimisation
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
3 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
4 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
5 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
6 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
7 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
8 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
9 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
10 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
11 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
12 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
13 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
14 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
15 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
16 Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept form Intercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
17 Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equations Parallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
18 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
19 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
20 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
21 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
22 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
23 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
24 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
25 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
26 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
27 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
28 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
29 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
30 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
31 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
32 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
33 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
34 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
35 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
36 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
37 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
38 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
39 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
40 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
41 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
42 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
43 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
44 Conic sections Introduction to conic sections and their general equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the conic section from the coefficients of the equation.
45 Conic sections The parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
46 Conic sections Circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
47 Conic sections Ellipses
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices and axes of an ellipse.
48 Conic sections Hyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
49 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
50 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
51 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
52 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
53 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
54 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
55 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
56 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
57 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
58 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
59 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
60 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
61 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
62 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
63 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
64 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
65 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
66 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
67 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
68 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
69 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
70 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
71 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
72 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
73 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
74 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
75 Polar coordinates Write and graph points in polar form with negative vectors (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using negative angles and negative vector lengths.
76 Matrices Basic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
77 Matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
78 Matrices Scalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
79 Matrices Multiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
80 Matrices Translation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
81 Matrices Translation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
82 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
83 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
84 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
85 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
86 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
87 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
88 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
89 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
90 Exam Exam – Year 11 Applied 5: Optimisation
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 Applied 6: Probability and Simulation Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 Applied 6: Probability and Simulation
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
3 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
4 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
5 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
6 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
7 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
8 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
9 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
10 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
11 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
12 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
13 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
14 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
15 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
16 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
17 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
18 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
19 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
20 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
21 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
22 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
23 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
24 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
25 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
26 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
27 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
28 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
29 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
30 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
31 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
32 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
33 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
34 Statistic-probability Binomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
35 Statistic-probability Binomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
36 Statistic-probability Counting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
37 Statistic-probability Unordered selections – combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formula, n c r both with and without a calculator and be able to use it to solve probability problems where unordered selections happen.
38 Exam Exam – Year 11 Applied 6: Probability and Simulation
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 Applied 8: Statistics and Working with Data Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 Applied 8: Statistics and Working with Data
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
3 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
4 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
5 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
6 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
7 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
8 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
9 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
10 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
11 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
12 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
13 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
14 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
15 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
16 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
17 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
18 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
19 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
20 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
21 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
22 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
23 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
24 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
25 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
26 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
27 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
28 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
29 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
30 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
31 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
32 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
33 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
34 Exam Exam – Year 11 Applied 8: Statistics and Working with Data
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 Methods Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 Methods
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
3 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
4 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
5 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
6 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
7 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
8 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
9 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
10 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
11 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
12 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
13 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
14 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
15 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
16 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
17 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
18 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
19 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
20 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
21 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
22 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
23 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
24 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
25 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
26 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
27 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
28 Geometry-constructions Geometric constructions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses.
29 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
30 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
31 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
32 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
33 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
34 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
35 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
36 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
37 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
38 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
39 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
40 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
41 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
42 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
43 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
44 Trigonometry-exact ratios Trigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
45 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
46 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
47 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
48 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
49 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
50 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
51 Coordinate Geometry-the plane Distance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
52 Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slope Mid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
53 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
54 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
55 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
56 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
57 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
58 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
59 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
60 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
61 Conic sections Circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
62 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
63 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
64 Conic sections Hyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
65 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
66 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – single condition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term locus and describe several using a single condition.
67 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – multiple conditions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will describe a locus that satisfies multiple conditions on a number plane.
68 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
69 Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept form Intercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
70 Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equations Parallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
71 Co-ordinate Geometry-Perpendicular lines Perpendicular lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the equation of a line, given that it is perpendicular to another stated line.
72 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
73 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Perpendicular distance
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the formula to calculate the distance between a given point and a given line. The student will also be able to calculate the distance between parallel lines.
74 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Line through intersection of two given lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line which goes through the intersection of two given lines and also through another named point or satisfies some other specified condition.
75 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Internal and external division of an interval
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide an interval according to a given ratio and to calculate what point divides an interval in a given ratio for both internal and external divisions.
76 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
77 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
78 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
79 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
80 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
81 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
82 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
83 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
84 Logarithms-Logs to solve equations Using logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
85 Logarithms-Change base formula Change of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
86 Logarithms-Graph-log curve The graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
87 Logarithms-Log curves Working with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
88 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
89 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
90 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
91 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
92 Arithmetic Progression The arithmetic progression
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is an Arithmetic Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the A.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
93 Arithmetic Progression Finding the position of a term in an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve many problems involving finding terms of an Arithmetic Progression.
94 Arithmetic Progression Given two terms of A.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find any term of an Arithmetic Progression when given two terms
95 Arithmetic Progression Arithmetic means
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make an arithmetic progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of arithmetic means.
96 Arithmetic Progression The sum to n terms of an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum of an Arithmetic Progression and how to use them in solving problems.
97 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
98 Geometric Progression Finding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
99 Geometric Progression Given two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
100 Sequences and Series-Geometric means Geometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
101 Sequences and Series-Sum of gp The sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
102 Sequences and Series-Sigma notation Sigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
103 Sequences and Series-Sum-infinity Limiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
104 Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinity Recurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
105 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
106 Sequences and Series-Superannuation Superannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
107 Sequences and Series-Time payments Time payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
108 Sequences and Series Applications of arithmetic sequences
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of problems involving practical situations with arithmetic series.
109 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
110 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
111 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
112 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
113 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
114 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
115 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
116 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
117 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
118 Surds Binomial expansions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds.
119 Surds Conjugate binomials with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds.
120 Surds Rationalising the denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds.
121 Surds Rationalising binomial denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions.
122 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
123 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
124 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
125 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
126 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
127 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
128 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
129 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
130 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
131 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
132 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
133 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
134 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
135 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
136 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
137 Logarithms-Complex numbers Imaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
138 Logarithms-Complex numbers Complex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
139 Logarithms-Complex numbers Plotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
140 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
141 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
142 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
143 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
144 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
145 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
146 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
147 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
148 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
149 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
150 Roots quad equations Sum and product of roots of quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum and product of roots of quadratic polynomials and how to use them. The student will understand how to form a quadratic equation given its roots.
151 Roots quad equations Sum and product of roots of cubic and quartic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to do problems on the sum and products of roots of cubic and quartic equations.
152 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
153 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
154 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
155 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
156 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
157 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
158 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
159 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
160 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
161 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
162 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
163 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
164 Conic sections Introduction to conic sections and their general equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the conic section from the coefficients of the equation.
165 Conic sections The parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
166 Conic sections Ellipses
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices and axes of an ellipse.
167 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
168 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
169 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
170 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
171 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
172 Polar coordinates Write and graph points in polar form with negative vectors (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using negative angles and negative vector lengths.
173 Exam Exam – Year 11 Methods
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 Specialist Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 Specialist
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
3 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
4 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
5 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
6 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
7 Geometry-constructions Geometric constructions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses.
8 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
9 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
10 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
11 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
12 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
13 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
14 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
15 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
16 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
17 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
18 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
19 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
20 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
21 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
22 Surds Binomial expansions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds.
23 Surds Conjugate binomials with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds.
24 Surds Rationalising the denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds.
25 Surds Rationalising binomial denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions.
26 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
27 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
28 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
29 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
30 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
31 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
32 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
33 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
34 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
35 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
36 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
37 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
38 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
39 Geometry To identify collinear points, coplanar lines and points in 2 and 3 dimensions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use correct terms to describe points, lines, intervals and rays.
40 Geometry – angles To determine angle labelling rules, naming angles according to size, angle bisector properties and related algebra
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will label angles, use a protractor and perform calculations using algebra involving angles.
41 Geometry-constructions Angle bisector construction and its properties (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to bisect an angle using a pair of compasses and a straight edge.
42 Geometry-constructions Circumcentre and incentre (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able geometrically construct the circumcentre and incentre for a triangle and to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate values.
43 Geometry-constructions Orthocentre and centroids (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able geometrically construct the orthocentre and centroid for a triangle and to use algebra to calculate values.
44 Geometry-quadrilaterals Midsegments of Triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use coordinate geometry to apply the midsegment properties of a triangle.
45 Geometry-quadrilaterals Classifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
46 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
47 Geometry-quadrilaterals Proving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
48 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
49 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
50 Geometry-quadrilaterals The quadrilateral family and coordinate methods in geometry
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will know the relationships between quadrilaterals and use coordinate methods to prove some of the properties.
51 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – single condition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term locus and describe several using a single condition.
52 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – multiple conditions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will describe a locus that satisfies multiple conditions on a number plane.
53 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
54 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
55 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
56 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
57 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
58 Special triangles Special triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
59 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
60 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
61 Geometry-congruence Proofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
62 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
63 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
64 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
65 Geometry – triangles Triangle inequality theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use the triangle inequality theorem.
66 Geometry-quadrilaterals Midsegments of Triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use coordinate geometry to apply the midsegment properties of a triangle.
67 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
68 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
69 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
70 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
71 Coordinate Geometry-the plane Distance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
72 Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slope Mid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
73 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
74 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
75 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
76 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
77 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
78 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
79 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
80 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
81 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
82 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
83 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
84 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
85 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
86 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
87 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
88 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
89 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
90 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
91 Trigonometry-exact ratios Trigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
92 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
93 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
94 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
95 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
96 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
97 Trig complementary angles Complementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
98 Trig identities Trigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
99 Trig larger angles Angles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
100 Trig larger angles Trigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
101 Graph sine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
102 Graph cosine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
103 Graphs tan curve Graphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
104 Trig larger angles Using one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
105 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
106 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
107 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
108 Trigonometry Sin(A+B) etc sum and difference identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using the reference triangles for 30, 45 and 60 degrees with the sum and difference of angles to find additional exact values of trigonometric ratios.
109 Trigonometry Double angle formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the double angle trig identities.
110 Trigonometry Half angle identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the power reducing formulas and the half angle trig identities.
111 Trigonometry t Formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations using the t substitution.
112 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
113 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
114 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
115 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
116 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
117 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
118 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
119 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
120 Logarithms-Logs to solve equations Using logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
121 Logarithms-Change base formula Change of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
122 Logarithms-Graph-log curve The graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
123 Logarithms-Log curves Working with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
124 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
125 Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept form Intercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
126 Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equations Parallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
127 Co-ordinate Geometry-Perpendicular lines Perpendicular lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the equation of a line, given that it is perpendicular to another stated line.
128 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
129 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Perpendicular distance
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the formula to calculate the distance between a given point and a given line. The student will also be able to calculate the distance between parallel lines.
130 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Line through intersection of two given lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line which goes through the intersection of two given lines and also through another named point or satisfies some other specified condition.
131 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Internal and external division of an interval
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide an interval according to a given ratio and to calculate what point divides an interval in a given ratio for both internal and external divisions.
132 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
133 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
134 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
135 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
136 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
137 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
138 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
139 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
140 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
141 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
142 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
143 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
144 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
145 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
146 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
147 Conic sections Introduction to conic sections and their general equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the conic section from the coefficients of the equation.
148 Conic sections The parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
149 Conic sections Circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
150 Conic sections Ellipses
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices and axes of an ellipse.
151 Conic sections Hyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
152 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
153 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
154 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
155 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
156 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
157 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
158 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
159 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
160 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
161 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
162 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
163 Logic Mathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
164 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
165 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal arcs on circles of equal radii subtend equal angles at the centre. Theorem – Equal angles at the centre of a circle on equal arcs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘Equal arcs on circles of equal radii, subtend equal angles at the centre’, and that ‘Equal angles at the centre of a circle stand on equal arcs.’ They should then be able to use these pro
166 Circle Geometry Theorem – The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord. Theorem – The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular to the chord.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord.’ and its converse theorem ‘The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular’
167 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centres. Theorem – Chords in a circle which are equidistant from the centre are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centre.
168 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
169 Circle Geometry Theorem – Angles in the same segment of a circle are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angles in the same segment are equal.
170 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle of a semi-circle is a right angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The angle of a semi-circle is a right-angle.’
171 Circle Geometry Theorem – The opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
172 Circle Geometry Theorem – The exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite.
173 Circle Geometry Theorem – The tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radius drawn to it at the point of contact.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the tangent and the radius of a circle are perpendicular at the point of contact.
174 Circle Geometry Theorem – Tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
175 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
176 Circle Geometry-cyclic quads Theorem – If the opposite angles in a quadrilateral are supplementary then the quadrilateral is cyclic.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that a quadrilateral is cyclic using the supplementary angles theorem.
177 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
178 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
179 Arithmetic Progression The arithmetic progression
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is an Arithmetic Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the A.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
180 Arithmetic Progression Finding the position of a term in an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve many problems involving finding terms of an Arithmetic Progression.
181 Arithmetic Progression Given two terms of A.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find any term of an Arithmetic Progression when given two terms
182 Arithmetic Progression Arithmetic means
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make an arithmetic progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of arithmetic means.
183 Arithmetic Progression The sum to n terms of an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum of an Arithmetic Progression and how to use them in solving problems.
184 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
185 Geometric Progression Finding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
186 Geometric Progression Given two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
187 Sequences and Series-Geometric means Geometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
188 Sequences and Series-Sum of gp The sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
189 Sequences and Series-Sigma notation Sigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
190 Sequences and Series-Sum-infinity Limiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
191 Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinity Recurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
192 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
193 Sequences and Series-Superannuation Superannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
194 Sequences and Series-Time payments Time payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
195 Sequences and Series Applications of arithmetic sequences
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of problems involving practical situations with arithmetic series.
196 Logarithms-Complex numbers Imaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
197 Logarithms-Complex numbers Complex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
198 Logarithms-Complex numbers Plotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
199 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
200 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
201 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
202 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
203 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
204 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
205 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
206 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
207 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
208 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
209 Roots quad equations Sum and product of roots of quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum and product of roots of quadratic polynomials and how to use them. The student will understand how to form a quadratic equation given its roots.
210 Roots quad equations Sum and product of roots of cubic and quartic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to do problems on the sum and products of roots of cubic and quartic equations.
211 Exam Exam – Year 11 Specialist
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 11 Maths and Specialist Studies Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11 Maths and Specialist Studies
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
3 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
4 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
5 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
6 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
7 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
8 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
9 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
10 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
11 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
12 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
13 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
14 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
15 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
16 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
17 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
18 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
19 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
20 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
21 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
22 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
23 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
24 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
25 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
26 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
27 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
28 Geometry-constructions Geometric constructions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses.
29 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
30 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
31 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
32 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
33 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
34 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
35 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
36 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
37 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
38 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
39 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
40 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
41 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
42 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
43 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
44 Trigonometry-exact ratios Trigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
45 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
46 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
47 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
48 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
49 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
50 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
51 Coordinate Geometry-the plane Distance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
52 Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slope Mid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
53 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
54 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
55 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
56 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
57 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
58 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
59 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
60 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
61 Conic sections Circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
62 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
63 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
64 Conic sections Hyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
65 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
66 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – single condition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term locus and describe several using a single condition.
67 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – multiple conditions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will describe a locus that satisfies multiple conditions on a number plane.
68 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
69 Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept form Intercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
70 Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equations Parallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
71 Co-ordinate Geometry-Perpendicular lines Perpendicular lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the equation of a line, given that it is perpendicular to another stated line.
72 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
73 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Perpendicular distance
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the formula to calculate the distance between a given point and a given line. The student will also be able to calculate the distance between parallel lines.
74 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Line through intersection of two given lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line which goes through the intersection of two given lines and also through another named point or satisfies some other specified condition.
75 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Internal and external division of an interval
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide an interval according to a given ratio and to calculate what point divides an interval in a given ratio for both internal and external divisions.
76 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
77 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
78 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
79 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
80 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
81 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
82 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
83 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
84 Logarithms-Logs to solve equations Using logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
85 Logarithms-Change base formula Change of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
86 Logarithms-Graph-log curve The graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
87 Logarithms-Log curves Working with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
88 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
89 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
90 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
91 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
92 Arithmetic Progression The arithmetic progression
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is an Arithmetic Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the A.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
93 Arithmetic Progression Finding the position of a term in an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve many problems involving finding terms of an Arithmetic Progression.
94 Arithmetic Progression Given two terms of A.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find any term of an Arithmetic Progression when given two terms
95 Arithmetic Progression Arithmetic means
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make an arithmetic progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of arithmetic means.
96 Arithmetic Progression The sum to n terms of an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum of an Arithmetic Progression and how to use them in solving problems.
97 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
98 Geometric Progression Finding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
99 Geometric Progression Given two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
100 Sequences and Series-Geometric means Geometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
101 Sequences and Series-Sum of gp The sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
102 Sequences and Series-Sigma notation Sigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
103 Sequences and Series-Sum-infinity Limiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
104 Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinity Recurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
105 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
106 Sequences and Series-Superannuation Superannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
107 Sequences and Series-Time payments Time payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
108 Sequences and Series Applications of arithmetic sequences
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of problems involving practical situations with arithmetic series.
109 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
110 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
111 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
112 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
113 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
114 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
115 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
116 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
117 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
118 Surds Binomial expansions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds.
119 Surds Conjugate binomials with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds.
120 Surds Rationalising the denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds.
121 Surds Rationalising binomial denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions.
122 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
123 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
124 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
125 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
126 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
127 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
128 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
129 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
130 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
131 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
132 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
133 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
134 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
135 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
136 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
137 Logarithms-Complex numbers Imaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
138 Logarithms-Complex numbers Complex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
139 Logarithms-Complex numbers Plotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
140 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
141 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
142 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
143 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
144 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
145 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
146 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
147 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
148 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
149 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
150 Roots quad equations Sum and product of roots of quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum and product of roots of quadratic polynomials and how to use them. The student will understand how to form a quadratic equation given its roots.
151 Roots quad equations Sum and product of roots of cubic and quartic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to do problems on the sum and products of roots of cubic and quartic equations.
152 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
153 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
154 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
155 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
156 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
157 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
158 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
159 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
160 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
161 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
162 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
163 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
164 Conic sections Introduction to conic sections and their general equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the conic section from the coefficients of the equation.
165 Conic sections The parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
166 Conic sections Ellipses
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices and axes of an ellipse.
167 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
168 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
169 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
170 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
171 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
172 Polar coordinates Write and graph points in polar form with negative vectors (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using negative angles and negative vector lengths.
173 Geometry To identify collinear points, coplanar lines and points in 2 and 3 dimensions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use correct terms to describe points, lines, intervals and rays.
174 Geometry – angles To determine angle labelling rules, naming angles according to size, angle bisector properties and related algebra
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will label angles, use a protractor and perform calculations using algebra involving angles.
175 Geometry-constructions Angle bisector construction and its properties (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to bisect an angle using a pair of compasses and a straight edge.
176 Geometry-constructions Circumcentre and incentre (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able geometrically construct the circumcentre and incentre for a triangle and to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate values.
177 Geometry-constructions Orthocentre and centroids (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able geometrically construct the orthocentre and centroid for a triangle and to use algebra to calculate values.
178 Geometry-quadrilaterals Midsegments of Triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use coordinate geometry to apply the midsegment properties of a triangle.
179 Geometry-quadrilaterals Classifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
180 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
181 Geometry-quadrilaterals Proving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
182 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
183 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
184 Geometry-quadrilaterals The quadrilateral family and coordinate methods in geometry
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will know the relationships between quadrilaterals and use coordinate methods to prove some of the properties.
185 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
186 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
187 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
188 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
189 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
190 Special triangles Special triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
191 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
192 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
193 Geometry-congruence Proofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
194 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
195 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
196 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
197 Geometry – triangles Triangle inequality theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use the triangle inequality theorem.
198 Trig complementary angles Complementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
199 Trig identities Trigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
200 Trig larger angles Angles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
201 Trig larger angles Trigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
202 Graph sine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
203 Graph cosine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
204 Graphs tan curve Graphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
205 Trig larger angles Using one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
206 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
207 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
208 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
209 Trigonometry Sin(A+B) etc sum and difference identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using the reference triangles for 30, 45 and 60 degrees with the sum and difference of angles to find additional exact values of trigonometric ratios.
210 Trigonometry Double angle formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the double angle trig identities.
211 Trigonometry Half angle identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the power reducing formulas and the half angle trig identities.
212 Trigonometry t Formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations using the t substitution.
213 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
214 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
215 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
216 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
217 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
218 Logic Mathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
219 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
220 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal arcs on circles of equal radii subtend equal angles at the centre. Theorem – Equal angles at the centre of a circle on equal arcs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘Equal arcs on circles of equal radii, subtend equal angles at the centre’, and that ‘Equal angles at the centre of a circle stand on equal arcs.’ They should then be able to use these pro
221 Circle Geometry Theorem – The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord. Theorem – The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular to the chord.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord.’ and its converse theorem ‘The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular’
222 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centres. Theorem – Chords in a circle which are equidistant from the centre are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centre.
223 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
224 Circle Geometry Theorem – Angles in the same segment of a circle are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angles in the same segment are equal.
225 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle of a semi-circle is a right angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The angle of a semi-circle is a right-angle.’
226 Circle Geometry Theorem – The opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
227 Circle Geometry Theorem – The exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite.
228 Circle Geometry Theorem – The tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radius drawn to it at the point of contact.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the tangent and the radius of a circle are perpendicular at the point of contact.
229 Circle Geometry Theorem – Tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
230 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
231 Circle Geometry-cyclic quads Theorem – If the opposite angles in a quadrilateral are supplementary then the quadrilateral is cyclic.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that a quadrilateral is cyclic using the supplementary angles theorem.
232 Exam Exam – Year 11 Maths and Specialist Studies
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 12 Applied 1: Applied Geometry Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12 Applied 1: Applied Geometry
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
3 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
4 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
5 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
6 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
7 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
8 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
9 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
10 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
11 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
12 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
13 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
14 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
15 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
16 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
17 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
18 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
19 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
20 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
21 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
22 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
23 Volume Volume of pyramids and cones.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones.
24 Volume Composite solids.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately.
25 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
26 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
27 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
28 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
29 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
30 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
31 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
32 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
33 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
34 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
35 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
36 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
37 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
38 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
39 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
40 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
41 Geometry-constructions Geometric constructions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses.
42 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
43 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
44 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
45 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
46 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
47 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
48 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
49 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
50 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
51 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
52 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
53 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
54 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
55 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
56 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
57 Trigonometry-exact ratios Trigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
58 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
59 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
60 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
61 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
62 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
63 Exam Exam – Year 12 Applied 1: Applied Geometry
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 12 Applied 2: Investments and Loans Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12 Applied 2: Investments and Loans
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
3 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
4 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
5 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
6 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
7 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
8 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
9 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
10 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
11 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
12 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
13 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
14 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
15 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
16 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
17 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
18 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
19 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
20 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
21 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
22 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
23 Exam Exam – Year 12 Applied 2: Investments and Loans
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 12 Applied 3: Maths and Small Business Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12 Applied 3: Maths and Small Business
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
3 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
4 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
5 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
6 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
7 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
8 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
9 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
10 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
11 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
12 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
13 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
14 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
15 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
16 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
17 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
18 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
19 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
20 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
21 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
22 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
23 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
24 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
25 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
26 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
27 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
28 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
29 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
30 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
31 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
32 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
33 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
34 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
35 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
36 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
37 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
38 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
39 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
40 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
41 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
42 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
43 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
44 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
45 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
46 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
47 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
48 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
49 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
50 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
51 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
52 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
53 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
54 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
55 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
56 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
57 Exam Exam – Year 12 Applied 3: Maths and Small Business
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 12 Applied 4: Matrices Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12 Applied 4: Matrices
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Matrices Basic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
3 Matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
4 Matrices Scalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
5 Matrices Multiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
6 Matrices Translation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
7 Matrices Translation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
8 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
9 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
10 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
11 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
12 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
13 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
14 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
15 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
16 Exam Exam – Year 12 Applied 4: Matrices
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 12 Applied 5: Optimisation Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12 Applied 5: Optimisation
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
3 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
4 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
5 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
6 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
7 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
8 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
9 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
10 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
11 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
12 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
13 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
14 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
15 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
16 Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept form Intercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
17 Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equations Parallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
18 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
19 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
20 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
21 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
22 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
23 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
24 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
25 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
26 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
27 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
28 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
29 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
30 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
31 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
32 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
33 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
34 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
35 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
36 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
37 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
38 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
39 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
40 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
41 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
42 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
43 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
44 Conic sections Introduction to conic sections and their general equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the conic section from the coefficients of the equation.
45 Conic sections The parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
46 Conic sections Circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
47 Conic sections Ellipses
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices and axes of an ellipse.
48 Conic sections Hyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
49 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
50 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
51 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
52 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
53 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
54 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
55 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
56 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
57 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
58 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
59 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
60 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
61 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
62 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
63 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
64 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
65 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
66 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
67 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
68 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
69 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
70 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
71 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
72 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
73 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
74 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
75 Polar coordinates Write and graph points in polar form with negative vectors (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using negative angles and negative vector lengths.
76 Matrices Basic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
77 Matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
78 Matrices Scalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
79 Matrices Multiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
80 Matrices Translation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
81 Matrices Translation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
82 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
83 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
84 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
85 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
86 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
87 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
88 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
89 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
90 Exam Exam – Year 12 Applied 5: Optimisation
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 12 Applied 6: Probability and Simulation Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12 Applied 6: Probability and Simulation
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
3 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
4 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
5 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
6 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
7 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
8 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
9 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
10 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
11 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
12 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
13 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
14 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
15 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
16 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
17 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
18 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
19 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
20 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
21 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
22 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
23 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
24 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
25 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
26 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
27 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
28 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
29 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
30 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
31 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
32 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
33 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
34 Statistic-probability Binomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
35 Statistic-probability Binomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
36 Statistic-probability Counting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
37 Statistic-probability Unordered selections – combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formula, n c r both with and without a calculator and be able to use it to solve probability problems where unordered selections happen.
38 Exam Exam – Year 12 Applied 6: Probability and Simulation
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 12 Applied 8: Statistics and Working with Data Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12 Applied 8: Statistics and Working with Data
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
3 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
4 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
5 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
6 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
7 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
8 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
9 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
10 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
11 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
12 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
13 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
14 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
15 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
16 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
17 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
18 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
19 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
20 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
21 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
22 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
23 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
24 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
25 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
26 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
27 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
28 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
29 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
30 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
31 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
32 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
33 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
34 Exam Exam – Year 12 Applied 8: Statistics and Working with Data
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 12 Methods Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12 Methods
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
3 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
4 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
5 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
6 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
7 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
8 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
9 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
10 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
11 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
12 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
13 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
14 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
15 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
16 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
17 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
18 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
19 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
20 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
21 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
22 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
23 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
24 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
25 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
26 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
27 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
28 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
29 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
30 Statistic-probability Binomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
31 Statistic-probability Binomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
32 Statistic-probability Counting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
33 Statistic-probability Unordered selections – combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formula, n c r both with and without a calculator and be able to use it to solve probability problems where unordered selections happen.
34 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
35 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
36 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
37 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
38 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
39 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
40 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
41 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
42 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
43 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
44 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
45 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
46 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
47 Logarithms-Logs to solve equations Using logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
48 Logarithms-Change base formula Change of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
49 Logarithms-Graph-log curve The graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
50 Logarithms-Log curves Working with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
51 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
52 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
53 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
54 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
55 Arithmetic Progression The arithmetic progression
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is an Arithmetic Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the A.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
56 Arithmetic Progression Finding the position of a term in an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve many problems involving finding terms of an Arithmetic Progression.
57 Arithmetic Progression Given two terms of A.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find any term of an Arithmetic Progression when given two terms
58 Arithmetic Progression Arithmetic means
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make an arithmetic progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of arithmetic means.
59 Arithmetic Progression The sum to n terms of an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum of an Arithmetic Progression and how to use them in solving problems.
60 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
61 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
62 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
63 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
64 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
65 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
66 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
67 Functions Parametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
68 Functions Polynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
69 Calculus Limits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
70 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
71 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
72 Calculus-differential, integ Meaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
73 Calculus-differential, integ Function of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
74 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
75 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
76 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
77 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
78 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
79 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
80 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
81 Matrices Basic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
82 Matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
83 Matrices Scalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
84 Matrices Multiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
85 Matrices Translation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
86 Matrices Translation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
87 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
88 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
89 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
90 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
91 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
92 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
93 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
94 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
95 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
96 Exam Exam – Year 12 Methods
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 12 Specialist Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12 Specialist
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Trig-reciprocal ratios Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the reciprocal trigonometric ratios of sine, cosine and tan, that is, the cosecant, secant and cotangent ratios.
3 Trig complementary angles Complementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
4 Trig identities Trigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
5 Trig larger angles Angles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
6 Trig larger angles Trigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
7 Graph sine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
8 Graph cosine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
9 Graphs tan curve Graphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
10 Trig larger angles Using one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
11 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
12 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
13 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
14 Trigonometry Sin(A+B) etc sum and difference identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using the reference triangles for 30, 45 and 60 degrees with the sum and difference of angles to find additional exact values of trigonometric ratios.
15 Trigonometry Double angle formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the double angle trig identities.
16 Trigonometry Half angle identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the power reducing formulas and the half angle trig identities.
17 Trigonometry t Formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations using the t substitution.
18 Logarithms-Complex numbers Imaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
19 Logarithms-Complex numbers Complex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
20 Logarithms-Complex numbers Plotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
21 Logarithms-Complex numbers Absolute value
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the absolute value or modulus of complex numbers
22 Logarithms-Complex numbers Trigonometric form of a complex number
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will write complex numbers in trigonometric or polar form. This may also be known as mod-ard form.
23 Logarithms-Complex numbers Multiplication and division of complex numbers in trig form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the trig form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
24 Logarithms-Complex numbers DeMoivre’s theorem (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find powers of complex numbers in trig form.
25 Logarithms-Complex numbers The nth root of real and complex numbers (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find roots of complex numbers in trig form.
26 Logarithms-Complex numbers Fundamental theorem of algebra (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and use the fundamental theorem of algebra to find factors for polynomials with real coefficients over the complex number field.
27 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
28 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
29 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
30 Logic Mathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
31 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
32 Geometry – triangles Triangle inequality theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use the triangle inequality theorem.
33 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
34 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
35 Polar coordinates Write and graph points in polar form with negative vectors (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using negative angles and negative vector lengths.
36 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
37 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
38 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
39 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
40 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
41 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
42 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
43 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
44 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
45 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
46 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
47 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
48 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
49 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal arcs on circles of equal radii subtend equal angles at the centre. Theorem – Equal angles at the centre of a circle on equal arcs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘Equal arcs on circles of equal radii, subtend equal angles at the centre’, and that ‘Equal angles at the centre of a circle stand on equal arcs.’ They should then be able to use these pro
50 Circle Geometry Theorem – The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord. Theorem – The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular to the chord.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord.’ and its converse theorem ‘The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular’
51 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centres. Theorem – Chords in a circle which are equidistant from the centre are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centre.
52 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
53 Circle Geometry Theorem – Angles in the same segment of a circle are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angles in the same segment are equal.
54 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle of a semi-circle is a right angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The angle of a semi-circle is a right-angle.’
55 Circle Geometry Theorem – The opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
56 Circle Geometry Theorem – The exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite.
57 Circle Geometry Theorem – The tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radius drawn to it at the point of contact.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the tangent and the radius of a circle are perpendicular at the point of contact.
58 Circle Geometry Theorem – Tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
59 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
60 Circle Geometry-cyclic quads Theorem – If the opposite angles in a quadrilateral are supplementary then the quadrilateral is cyclic.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that a quadrilateral is cyclic using the supplementary angles theorem.
61 Calculus Limits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
62 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
63 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
64 Calculus-differential, integ Meaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
65 Calculus-differential, integ Function of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
66 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
67 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
68 Calculus-2nd derivative The second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
69 Calculus – Curve sketching Curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
70 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
71 Calculus – Integration Integration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
72 Calculus – Computation area Computation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
73 Calculus – Computation volumes Computation of volumes of revolution
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to choose an appropriate volume formula, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and then calculate a result to a prescribed accuracy.
74 Calculus – Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules The Trapezium rule and Simpson’s rule
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to calculate sub-intervals, set up a table of values, then apply the Trapezoidal Rule, or Simpson’s Rule to approximate an area beneath a curve.
75 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
76 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
77 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
78 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
79 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
80 Functions Parametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
81 Functions Polynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
82 Functions Parametric functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some standard parametric forms using trigonometric identities, appreciate the beauty of the the graphs that can be generated and an application to projectile motion.
83 Exam Exam – Year 12 Specialist
Objective: Exam
Go to top

NT Year 12 Maths and Specialist Studies Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12 Maths and Specialist Studies
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
3 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
4 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
5 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
6 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
7 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
8 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
9 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
10 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
11 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
12 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
13 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
14 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
15 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
16 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
17 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
18 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
19 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
20 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
21 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
22 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
23 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
24 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
25 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
26 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
27 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
28 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
29 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
30 Statistic-probability Binomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
31 Statistic-probability Binomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
32 Statistic-probability Counting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
33 Statistic-probability Unordered selections – combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formula, n c r both with and without a calculator and be able to use it to solve probability problems where unordered selections happen.
34 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
35 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
36 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
37 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
38 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
39 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
40 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
41 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
42 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
43 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
44 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
45 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
46 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
47 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
48 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
49 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
50 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
51 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
52 Logarithms-Logs to solve equations Using logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
53 Logarithms-Change base formula Change of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
54 Logarithms-Graph-log curve The graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
55 Logarithms-Log curves Working with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
56 Calculus Limits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
57 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
58 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
59 Calculus-differential, integ Meaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
60 Calculus-differential, integ Function of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
61 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
62 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
63 Calculus-2nd derivative The second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
64 Calculus – Curve sketching Curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
65 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
66 Calculus – Integration Integration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
67 Calculus – Computation area Computation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
68 Calculus – Computation volumes Computation of volumes of revolution
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to choose an appropriate volume formula, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and then calculate a result to a prescribed accuracy.
69 Matrices Basic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
70 Matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
71 Matrices Scalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
72 Matrices Multiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
73 Matrices Translation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
74 Matrices Translation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
75 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
76 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
77 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
78 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
79 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
80 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
81 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
82 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
83 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
84 Trig-reciprocal ratios Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the reciprocal trigonometric ratios of sine, cosine and tan, that is, the cosecant, secant and cotangent ratios.
85 Trig complementary angles Complementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
86 Trig identities Trigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
87 Trig larger angles Angles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
88 Trig larger angles Trigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
89 Graph sine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
90 Graph cosine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
91 Graphs tan curve Graphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
92 Trig larger angles Using one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
93 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
94 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
95 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
96 Trigonometry Sin(A+B) etc sum and difference identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using the reference triangles for 30, 45 and 60 degrees with the sum and difference of angles to find additional exact values of trigonometric ratios.
97 Trigonometry Double angle formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the double angle trig identities.
98 Trigonometry Half angle identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the power reducing formulas and the half angle trig identities.
99 Trigonometry t Formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations using the t substitution.
100 Logarithms-Complex numbers Imaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
101 Logarithms-Complex numbers Complex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
102 Logarithms-Complex numbers Plotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
103 Logarithms-Complex numbers Absolute value
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the absolute value or modulus of complex numbers
104 Logarithms-Complex numbers Trigonometric form of a complex number
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will write complex numbers in trigonometric or polar form. This may also be known as mod-ard form.
105 Logarithms-Complex numbers Multiplication and division of complex numbers in trig form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the trig form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
106 Logarithms-Complex numbers DeMoivre’s theorem (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find powers of complex numbers in trig form.
107 Logarithms-Complex numbers The nth root of real and complex numbers (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find roots of complex numbers in trig form.
108 Logarithms-Complex numbers Fundamental theorem of algebra (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and use the fundamental theorem of algebra to find factors for polynomials with real coefficients over the complex number field.
109 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
110 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
111 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
112 Logic Mathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
113 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
114 Geometry – triangles Triangle inequality theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use the triangle inequality theorem.
115 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
116 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
117 Polar coordinates Write and graph points in polar form with negative vectors (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using negative angles and negative vector lengths.
118 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
119 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
120 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
121 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
122 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
123 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
124 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
125 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
126 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
127 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
128 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal arcs on circles of equal radii subtend equal angles at the centre. Theorem – Equal angles at the centre of a circle on equal arcs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘Equal arcs on circles of equal radii, subtend equal angles at the centre’, and that ‘Equal angles at the centre of a circle stand on equal arcs.’ They should then be able to use these pro
129 Circle Geometry Theorem – The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord. Theorem – The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular to the chord.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord.’ and its converse theorem ‘The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular’
130 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centres. Theorem – Chords in a circle which are equidistant from the centre are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centre.
131 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
132 Circle Geometry Theorem – Angles in the same segment of a circle are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angles in the same segment are equal.
133 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle of a semi-circle is a right angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The angle of a semi-circle is a right-angle.’
134 Circle Geometry Theorem – The opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
135 Circle Geometry Theorem – The exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite.
136 Circle Geometry Theorem – The tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radius drawn to it at the point of contact.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the tangent and the radius of a circle are perpendicular at the point of contact.
137 Circle Geometry Theorem – Tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
138 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
139 Circle Geometry-cyclic quads Theorem – If the opposite angles in a quadrilateral are supplementary then the quadrilateral is cyclic.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that a quadrilateral is cyclic using the supplementary angles theorem.
140 Calculus – Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules The Trapezium rule and Simpson’s rule
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to calculate sub-intervals, set up a table of values, then apply the Trapezoidal Rule, or Simpson’s Rule to approximate an area beneath a curve.
141 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
142 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
143 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
144 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
145 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
146 Functions Parametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
147 Functions Polynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
148 Functions Parametric functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some standard parametric forms using trigonometric identities, appreciate the beauty of the the graphs that can be generated and an application to projectile motion.
149 Exam Exam – Year 12 Maths and Specialist Studies
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Literacy

Australian National Curriculum Foundation - Kindergarten Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 It’s time to learn your A B C! The Alphabet!
Objective: Students will practise reading the letters of the alphabet and practise recognition of: a, b, c, d, e, f.
2 It’s time to learn your A B C! 1 2 3 – It’s A B C!
Objective: Students will hear and practise saying the alphabet and the numbers 1-11.
3 It’s time to learn your A B C! How do you spell that?
Objective: Students will develop their letter recognition skills by listening to a conversation. They will be able to identify the letters by name.
4 It’s time to learn your A B C! It’s time!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about asking and telling the time on the hour and half hour.
5 It’s time to learn your A B C! What time is it?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by listening to a conversation about asking and telling the time. They will practise using the key sentences.
6 It’s time to learn your A B C! ‘A’ sounds like …!
Objective: Students will listen to, discriminate between and practise the sounds of the letters a, b, c, d, e, f.
7 Hello! How are you? Hello! I’m Lulu.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which they will meet some new friends.
8 Hello! How are you? My name is Jack!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which new friends and new vocabulary are introduced.
9 Eight Purple Stars! Ten Little Pandas
Objective: Students will read a picture story and practise the numbers 1-10.
10 Eight Purple Stars! What colour is it?
Objective: Students will read and practise the words for basic colours. They will learn to answer the question: ‘What colour is …?’ and reply with ‘It’s …’.
11 Fun at School Close the door, please!
Objective: Students will develop their listening and speaking skills. They will read and hear a picture story, and practise classroom instructions.
12 Fun at School This is my father and mother.
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills. They will read a picture story and become familiar with ‘This is …’ and ‘That is …’.
13 What’s this? It’s my green eraser!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which some possessive pronouns are used. They will also become familiar with the questions: ‘What’s this?’ and ‘What’s that?’.
14 What’s this? What’s in the box?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will learn to ask and answer the question ‘Is it a …?’.
15 A New Boy at School A Letter from Peter
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also revise colours and numbers, and learn to talk about their families.
16 A New Boy at School Where’s my dog?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with some prepositions.
17 My Family Where’s the red kite?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading and listening to a picture story. They will also practise the use of ‘in’, ‘on’ and ‘under’.
18 My Family My Family Tree
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about the family. They will increase their vocabulary for family relationships and occupations, and they will learn to use ‘this’ and ‘that’.
19 About People That’s his cow!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about occupations. They will also learn about the possessive adjectives ‘his’, ‘her’ and ‘their’.
20 About People These are my feet.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills and vocabulary by reading a text about the parts of the body. They will practise using ‘this’ and ‘these’, and learn to form plurals.
21 Animal Mania! What animal is that?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about animals. Students will practise asking and answering questions, and they will revise colours and numbers.
22 Animal Mania! A Very Tall Giraffe
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about animals in which more adjectives are used.
23 We like to play games. Holidays!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about fun activities to do in the holidays. Students will practise using ‘let’s’ and learn the days of the week.
24 We like to play games. What’s your favourite?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about activities they like to do. They will learn to talk about their preferences.
25 Do you like hamburgers? At a Café
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about food preferences.
26 Do you like hamburgers? This is Bobby.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story. They will also learn to ask questions about likes and dislikes.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 1 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
2 Sentences The Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
3 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
4 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
5 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
6 Sentences The Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
7 Parts of Speech Part h Articles and Demonstratives
Objective: To identify and use articles and demonstratives correctly.
8 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
9 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
10 Pronouns Pronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
11 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
12 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
13 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
14 It’s time to learn how to tell the time! No school! It’s Sunday!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about daily routines.
15 It’s time to learn how to tell the time! Where are my clothes?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about items of clothing. They will learn about the prepositions – ‘on’, ‘under’, ‘in’.
16 School and Play I have lots of subjects!
Objective: Students will practise reading, and saying words and simple sentences to describe school subjects and the days of the week.
17 School and Play On the Weekend
Objective: Students will practise reading and recognising simple sentences about weekend activities.
18 It’s Christmas time! It’s time for Maths!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text in which quarter past, quarter to, 5 past, 5 to, 10 past and 10 to the hour are used.
19 It’s Christmas time! Festivals are fun!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about Christmas and Chinese New Year.
20 I walk in the summer. The Seasons
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and practise new words to describe the seasons.
21 I walk in the summer. How do you go to school?
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and practise new words that describe modes of transport. They will also ask and answer questions about transport to different places.
22 What’s the weather like today? Have you got a ‘W’?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which ‘have got’ is used. They will also revise the letters of the alphabet and learn some new ones.
23 What’s the weather like today? It’s a sunny day!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about the weather.
24 What are you doing now? Shhhh! Dad is sleeping!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used.
25 What are you doing now? We are having a picnic!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used to ask and answer questions.
26 They’re usually in the lounge room. Hide and Seek
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about finding people.
27 They’re usually in the lounge room. An Unusual Day
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the simple present and the continuous present tenses are used. They will also learn the little words that help to sequence a story.
28 Left! Right! Let’s go! Where’s the shop?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which simple directions are given using the imperative.
29 Left! Right! Let’s go! Ladies and Gentlemen!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used to talk about a concert.
30 Up, down and around we go! Roller-coaster Ride
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which routes are described using the present continuous tense.
31 Up, down and around we go! Catch that car!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story which focuses on street directions and places.
32 Sentences The Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
33 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
34 Spelling Spelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
35 Basic Dictionary Use Basic Dictionary Use
Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries.
36 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
37 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 2 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
2 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
3 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
4 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
5 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
6 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
7 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
8 Nouns Collective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
9 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
10 Spelling Spelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
11 Spelling Skills Syllabification
Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables.
12 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
13 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
14 Spelling Spelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
15 We’re very busy. Fast Food
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading what Peter and Chen say about fast food. They will also practise using the present tense, and asking and answering questions using ‘do’.
16 We’re very busy. On the farm
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading, in which the present continuous tense is used.
17 I can’t do that! This is a great park!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a story about a park. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘this’ and ‘these’ for things that are near and ‘that’ and ‘those’ for things that are far away.
18 I can’t do that! I can speak English!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short speech about what a person ‘can’ and ‘can’t’ do.
19 Can I look at your new kite? Can I help you?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text using ‘can’ and ‘can’t’ to make offers and requests.
20 Can I look at your new kite? I’ve got a secret!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘has’ and ‘have got’ are used to talk about possessions.
21 Oh, no! Not the Doctor! Doctor, what have I got?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text about illnesses.
22 Oh, no! Not the Doctor! There is a zoo in Sydney!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘There is’ and ‘There are’ in relation to zoo animals is used.
23 It’s all in the future! One World, One Dream
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ is used to talk about the future.
24 It’s all in the future! You are going to have a great time!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ is used to make future plans.
25 Maybe she’ll be funny! My animal friends are wonderful!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will revise adjectives that describe personality.
26 Maybe she’ll be funny! What will Fido do next?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘will’ to express a future action.
27 First we’ll see a big city. Sydney: It’s special!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will focus on the use of adjectives to describe cities.
28 First we’ll see a big city. Then we’ll eat it!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘will’ when describing a process.
29 We need to take a metal pan. What’s it made of?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about what things are made of. They will also revise prepositions of location.
30 We need to take a metal pan. They want to go camping.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about a camping trip. They will also become familiar with the terms ‘need to’ and ‘want to’.
31 First we’ll go to the eighth floor. Let’s make pancakes!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, an illustrated recipe. They will also revise words that help them tell a story – ‘First’, ‘Then’, ‘Next’, ‘After that’ and ‘Finally’.
32 First we’ll go to the eighth floor. Who’s shopping at Sunsets?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about shopping in a department store. They will also revise some prepositions and learn some more in simple phrases.
33 On Monday I’ll buy new jeans. Whose Shoes?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture poem about shopping. They will also revise colours and pronouns.
34 On Monday I’ll buy new jeans. Chen’s Holiday Plans
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short story about Chen’s plans for his holidays. They will also practise verbs.
35 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
36 Basic Dictionary Use Basic Dictionary Use
Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries.
37 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 3 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
2 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
3 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
4 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
5 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
6 Nouns Collective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
7 Let’s hit the beach! Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
8 Let’s hit the beach! Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
9 Contractions Contractions
Objective: To identify and use contractions.
10 Apostrophe – Possession Apostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
11 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
12 Sentence Structure Part a Subject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
13 Thanks and goodbye Time clauses
Objective: Learn how to use time clauses.
14 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
15 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
16 Simple and Compound Verbs Simple and Compound Verbs
Objective: To identify and use simple and compound verbs.
17 Auxiliary Verbs Auxiliary Verbs
Objective: To identify and use auxiliary verbs within compound verbs.
18 Regular and Irregular Verbs Regular and Irregular Verbs
Objective: To identify and use regular and irregular verbs in the present and past tense.
19 Verbs – Infinitives Verbs – Infinitives
Objective: To identify and use the infinitive form of the verb.
20 What’s Homestay? Simple Present
Objective: Learn the correct structure for the simple present.
21 Setting off Present perfect
Objective: Learn the correct structure for the present perfect.
22 Amazing Aussie animals Present continuous
Objective: Learn about the present continuous tense.
23 Amazing Aussie animals Past continuous
Objective: Learn about the past continuous tense.
24 Big day out! The future with ‘will’ and ‘going to’
Objective: Learn the uses of ‘will’ and ‘going to’ to talk about the future.
25 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
26 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
27 Amazing Aussie animals Giving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
28 Thanks and goodbye Talking about feelings
Objective: Present constructions for talking about feelings.
29 What do you like to do? Adverbs of frequency
Objective: Learn about the past continuous tense.
30 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
31 Vowels and Consonants Vowels and Consonants
Objective: To identify and use vowels and consonants.
32 Vowels Vowels – Long and Short
Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use.
33 Plurals Plurals 1 – simple
Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly.
34 Plurals Plurals 2 – special rules
Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’.
35 Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
36 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
37 What do you like to do? Expressing likes and dislikes
Objective: Present phrases used to express likes and dislikes.
38 Other Places and Other Times A New Penfriend
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehensions skills by reading a letter of introduction to a penfriend. They will also practise the present continuous tense and become familiar with vocabulary about different nationalities.
39 Other Places and Other Times Will we have robots?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the future tense is used.
40 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
41 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
42 Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 4 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
2 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
3 Amazing Aussie animals Giving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
4 Thanks and goodbye Talking about feelings
Objective: Present constructions for talking about feelings.
5 Pronouns Pronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
6 Pronouns Pronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
7 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
8 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
9 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
10 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
11 BBQ Party! Sequence markers
Objective: Learn the words used in sequences or ordering.
12 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
13 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
14 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
15 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
16 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
17 A new home Prepositions of location
Objective: Learn about prepositions of location.
18 Here we are! Adjectives
Objective: Learn the use of adjectives.
19 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
20 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
21 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
22 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
23 A new home Prepositions of location
Objective: Learn about prepositions of location.
24 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
25 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
26 Vowels Vowels – Long and Short
Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use.
27 Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
28 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
29 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
30 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
31 Adjectives Adjectives – from Nouns and Verbs
Objective: To create adjectives from nouns and verbs. E.g. China – Chinese
32 Adjectives Adjectives – Comparatives and Superlatives
Objective: To identify and use comparative and superlative adjectives.
33 Here we are! Comparatives and superlatives
Objective: Learn how to use comparatives and superlatives in English.
34 Setting off Questions
Objective: Learn the correct structure for forming yes/no questions. Learn the correct structure for forming wh questions.
35 Here we are! Asking for repetition
Objective: Learn how to ask someone to repeat something in English.
36 A new home Offers and requests
Objective: Present the phrases used to make offers and requests.
37 Amazing Aussie animals Giving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
38 There weren’t many … There weren’t any flowers!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using the simple past tense of the verb ‘to be’.
39 There weren’t many … A Shopping List
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise asking questions using ‘How much …’ and ‘How many …’.
40 It couldn’t be mine! Uncle Bill said we could!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using ‘could’ and ‘couldn’t’ to refer to past events.
41 It couldn’t be mine! The Riding Lesson
Objective: Students will build vocabulary, answer comprehension questions and practise using possessive pronouns and adjectives.
42 Clean up Australia! Too much rubbish!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and reading comprehension skills. They will also practise using ‘too much’, ‘too many’ and ‘enough’.
43 Clean up Australia! Sports Report
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and reading comprehension skills. They will also practise using the adverbs ‘well’ and ‘badly’.
44 Friends all over the World Now I can do it by myself.
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills. They will practise using ‘too much’, ‘too many’ and ‘enough’.
45 Friends all over the World A Letter to a Pen Pal
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their comprehension skills and practise using the simple present tense.
46 What’s the problem? What’s the matter?
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a passage in which words are used to describe feelings.
47 What’s the problem? A School Outing
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a notice. They will learn about the use of ‘should’ and ‘shouldn’t’.
48 When I was Young Life used to be different.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, an interview. They will learn how to describe finished activities using ‘used to’.
49 When I was Young Have you tidied your room?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a rhyme. They will also learn the imperfect tense and its use.
50 Space and Time We’ve done our research.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will learn some irregular verbs in the present perfect tense.
51 Space and Time We’ve written a poem!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a rhyme. They will learn more irregular verbs in the present perfect tense.
52 Choices and Places A New Jacket
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which preferences are discussed and comparisons are made.
53 Choices and Places He has travelled a lot.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the present perfect and the simple past tenses are used.
54 What’s the best way to do it? A Text Message
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text which focuses on the use of ‘have to’ and adverbs of time.
55 What’s the best way to do it? What will we make?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the children discuss a project.
56 Class Camp Dear Parents, …
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a letter which uses a variety of verb tenses.
57 Class Camp A Postcard from Kate
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading an informal letter in which the simple past tense of the verb is used.
58 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
59 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
60 Vocabulary Development Vocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
61 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
62 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
63 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
64 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
65 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
66 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
67 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
68 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
69 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
70 Capitalisation Capital Letters 2
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters.
71 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
72 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
73 Common Errors Common Errors in writing
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
74 Common Errors Common Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
75 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
76 Vocabulary Development Vocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
77 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 5 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
2 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
3 Apostrophe – Possession Apostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
4 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
5 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
6 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
7 Sentence Structure Part a Subject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
8 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
9 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
10 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
11 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
12 Thanks and goodbye Adjectives
Objective: Learn the use of adjectives.
13 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
14 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
15 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
16 Plurals Plurals 3 – Unusual
Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o’; by changing the vowels or by adding letters.
17 Plurals Plurals 4 – Unusual
Objective: To use nouns whose singular and plural forms are the same. To use compound noun plurals.
18 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
19 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
20 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
21 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
22 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
23 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
24 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
25 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
26 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
27 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
28 There’s a … It’s famous!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using the verb ‘to be’.
29 There’s a … There are lots of things in my town.
Objective: Students will increase their reading comprehension skills and their vocabulary. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘There is …’ and ‘There are …’.
30 Hobbies and Festivals Collecting things
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and increase their vocabulary. They will learn the verb ‘to have’. They will also learn to use ‘this’ and ‘these’ correctly.
31 Hobbies and Festivals My favourite festival
Objective: Students will build vocabulary; begin to use conjunctions ‘and’, ‘but’ or ‘because’.
32 What can you do? Letter to a penfriend
Objective: Students will be able to read and understand an informal letter and use the present tense of ‘can’ and ‘can’t’.
33 What can you do? Have you got everything?
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a written text using ‘have’, ‘haven’t got’, ‘but’ or ‘and’.
34 A visit to the Zoo About Koalas
Objective: Students will be able to answer questions about the text, identify the target language point ‘like’ + the infinitive) and distinguish between simple facts and opinions.
35 A visit to the Zoo I’m a zookeeper.
Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions on reading, increase their vocabulary and use the frequency adverbs, ‘always’, ‘sometimes’, ‘often’ and ‘never’.
36 What do you want to do? Big Dreams
Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions, increase their vocabulary and be able to use ‘want’ + the infinitive in positive and negative sentences, and in a question.
37 What do you want to do? Fruit Bowl
Objective: Students will be able to read and understand the text, to answer questions and to notice the use of the imperative form.
38 It’s going to be fun! It’s going to be fantastic!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a story. They will learn how to talk about the future using the verb ‘to go + the infinitive’.
39 It’s going to be fun! What’s on the menu?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading various menus. They will also learn to ask questions politely.
40 We are all doing things! I’m having a great time!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a letter which focuses on the use of the present continuous tense.
41 We are all doing things! Who can help me?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which requests for help are made.
42 To Australia and Back! Getting There!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about travel plans. They will also learn about coordinate conjunctions.
43 To Australia and Back! I came back!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which Chen talks about going home to China. They will also revise the simple past tense.
44 Famous People Bruce Lee
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about Bruce Lee. They will also practise the use of the simple past tense and learn more irregular verbs.
45 Famous People Alexander Bell
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about Alexander Bell. They will also learn how to use ‘could’ and ‘couldn’t’, and review questions using ‘Wh’ words.
46 Finding Buster! Finding Buster! – A Movie Review
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehension skills and increase their vocabulary by reading a movie review. They will also learn how to use the conjunction ‘because’ to answer ‘why’ questions.
47 Finding Buster! I’m going to be busy!
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehension skills by reading a story about plans for the weekend. They will revise the use of the verb ‘to go’ in the present tense + the infinitive to talk about the future.
48 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
49 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
50 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
51 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
52 Capitalisation Capital Letters 2
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters.
53 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
54 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
55 Common Errors Common Errors in writing
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
56 Common Errors Common Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
57 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
58 Vocabulary Development Vocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
59 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
60 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
61 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
62 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
63 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
64 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 6 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Pronouns Pronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
2 Pronouns Pronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
3 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
4 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
5 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
6 Mass and Count Nouns Determiners
Objective: To identify and use determiners correctly with mass and count nouns.
7 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
8 Verb tense – Compound Verb tense – Compound
Objective: To identify and use ‘to be’ and ‘to have’ with the appropriate participle of the main verb.
9 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
10 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
11 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
12 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
13 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
14 Spelling Skills Syllabification
Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables.
15 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
16 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
17 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
18 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
19 Gerunds Gerunds
Objective: To identify and use gerunds.
20 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
21 Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives
Objective: To identify and use participles as verbs or adjectives as indicators of continuing action.
22 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
23 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
24 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
25 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
26 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
27 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
28 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
29 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
30 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
31 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
32 Have you met? Hello!
Objective: Use the present tense verb to be (am, is and are) correctly in written and spoken work. Answer comprehension questions and apply am, is and are correctly.
33 Have you met? The world in a classroom!
Objective: At the end of this lesson, students will have learnt how to ask a question in English, and how to use the definite and indefinite articles.
34 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
35 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
36 Case – Nouns and Pronouns Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
37 Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives
Objective: To identify and use participles as verbs or adjectives as indicators of continuing action.
38 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
39 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
40 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
41 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
42 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 7 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
2 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
3 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
4 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
5 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
6 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
7 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
8 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
9 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
10 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
11 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
12 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
13 Apostrophe – Possession Apostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
14 Punctuation Punctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
15 Interjections Interjections
Objective: To identify and use interjections correctly.
16 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
17 Sentence Structure Part a Subject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
18 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
19 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
20 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
21 Big day out! First and second conditionals
Objective: Learn the use of first conditionals. Learn the use of second conditionals.
22 Let’s hit the beach! Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
23 Let’s hit the beach! Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
24 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
25 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
26 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
27 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
28 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
29 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
30 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
31 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 8 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
2 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
3 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
4 Case – Nouns and Pronouns Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
5 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
6 Punctuation Punctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
7 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
8 Punctuation Punctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
9 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
10 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
11 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
12 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
13 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
14 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
15 Case – Nouns and Pronouns Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
16 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
17 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
18 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
19 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
20 Plurals Plurals 1 – simple
Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly.
21 Plurals Plurals 2 – special rules
Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’.
22 Plurals Plurals 3 – Unusual
Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o’; by changing the vowels or by adding letters.
23 Plurals Plurals 4 – Unusual
Objective: To use nouns whose singular and plural forms are the same. To use compound noun plurals.
24 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
25 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
26 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
27 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
28 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
29 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
30 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
31 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
32 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
33 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
34 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
35 Antonyms and Synonyms Antonyms and Synonyms
Objective: To identify and use antonyms and synonyms.
36 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
37 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
38 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 9 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
2 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
3 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
4 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
5 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
6 Big day out! First and second conditionals
Objective: Learn the use of first conditionals. Learn the use of second conditionals.
7 BBQ Party! Sequence markers
Objective: Learn the words used in sequences or ordering.
8 Mass and Count Nouns Determiners
Objective: To identify and use determiners correctly with mass and count nouns.
9 Let’s hit the beach! Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
10 Let’s hit the beach! Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
11 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
12 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
13 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
14 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
15 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
16 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
17 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
18 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
19 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
20 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
21 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
22 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
23 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
24 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
25 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
26 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
27 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
28 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
29 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
30 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
31 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
32 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
33 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
34 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 10 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Pronouns Pronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
2 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
3 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
4 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
5 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
6 Nouns Collective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
7 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
8 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
9 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
10 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
11 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
12 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
13 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
14 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
15 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
16 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
17 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
18 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top